2015 Dodge Charger SRT 392 Owner's Manual OM 5th?myyear=21&myvehicle=3&o Button.x=24&o Button

User Manual: 2015 Dodge Charger SRT Service Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 597

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2015 Charger SRT 392

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL

FCA US LLC
15D482-126-AE

Fifth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Charger SRT 392

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE
1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
DODGE is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it contains a complete listing of all subjects.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

INTRODUCTION 5

Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ SRT Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .18

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .26

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .58

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push to operate the ignition.
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

SRT Key Fobs
NOTE: SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine comes with three key fobs (two red and
one black) that allow for different engine power levels.
Please refer to the ⬙Drive Modes⬙ in the “Uconnect
Settings” section for further descriptions.
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.

Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob

Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Syscannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Customer Key Programming

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
General Information
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will prosubject to the following conditions:
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
• This device must accept any interference that may be will flash.
received, including interference that may cause undeRearming Of The System
sired operation.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting To Disarm The System
And Operating⬙ for further information).
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
the following methods:
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
vehicle:
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
information.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position.
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
further information).
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security System Manual Override
Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior doors using the manual door lock plunger.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the doors or open any door.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle outside mirrors (if equipped).
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit• The front courtesy overhead console and door courter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
NOTE:

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock The Doors

Flash Lights With Lock

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
Sound Horn With Lock
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
and the interior lights will turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
horn will remain on.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Emergency Key Removal
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if
housing or the printed circuit board.
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.

battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information

Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over • This device must accept any interference received,
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
including interference that may cause undesired opsolid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
eration.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
• Shift lever in PARK
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

• Doors closed
• Hood closed

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Hazard switch off
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Battery at an acceptable charge level
approximately 300 ft (91 m).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• RKE PANIC button not pushed

To Enter Remote Start Mode

• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice
(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle

doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
you push the START button.

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or Cancel Remote Start
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system occur:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

• Low Fuel Light turns on.

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the • The hood is opened.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
2

• The brake pedal is pushed.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.

Door Lock Knob

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

Power Door Locks

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. Refer to Please see your authorized dealer for service.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
power door locks if:
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
enabled.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
Door Lock System
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
1. Open the rear door.
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower rewindow and open the door with the outside door handle.
sponse time.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, will arm the
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
security alarm.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
ment Panel” for further information.
door is unlocked.
NOTE:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
OFF position.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
search in any passive entry vehicle.
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
transmitter while a door is ajar.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
knobs.
handle while a door is ajar.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
the door is ajar.
Entry door handle.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does
not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the To Enter The Trunk
car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
of the deck lid.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.

Trunk Button

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door NOTE:
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS

WARNING!

Power Window Switches

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
to the first detent and release it when you want the
switch again to close the window.
window to stop.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
WARNING!
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
Window Lockout Switch
window before closing.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
Reset Auto-Up
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
push and release the window lockout button again windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur(setting it in the UP position).
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Window Lockout Switch

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position , the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Trunk Release Button

The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.

WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
(Continued)

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-inthe-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha- OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
nism.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
them or under their arm.
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
shoulder belts properly.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
Air Bags room to inflate.
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Seat Belt Systems
between occupants and the door and occupants could Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
be injured.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact happen far away from home or on your own street.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authoOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactiduration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. vating BeltAlert.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occudriver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and Lap/Shoulder Belts
visual notification.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active lap/shoulder belts.
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

(Continued)

WARNING!

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

WARNING! (Continued)

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

(Continued)

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Positioning The Lap Belt

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender

WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu- Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
pant, it must be removed.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components

• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters
the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING!

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Knee Impact Bolsters

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
seat belts and body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.

Rollover Events

If A Deployment Occurs

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have detion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by bags will not be in place to protect you.
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
WARNING!
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or NOTE:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
but they will open during air bag deployment.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
structions for cleaning.
authorized dealer immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Enhanced Accident Response System

System Reset Procedure

In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
turned to the “OFF” position.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
• Unlock the doors automatically.
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or dealer service the air bag system immediately.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
eight-second interval.
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
remains on while driving.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
again after initial startup.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection is detected that could affect the air bag system. The tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. system immediately.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single

chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
(Continued)

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
(Continued)

modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera- such as law enforcement, that have the special equiptor and/or brake pedal
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
times, including babies and children.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–732–8243.

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetychildren from newborn size to the child almost large
index-53.htm
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large for
Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2

•
•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?

Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be
removed?

Yes

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Center position only may be
removed.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.

WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
in any direction.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
ing position.
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
turer’s instructions.
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
them.
Belt

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?

Yes

Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact
Center Only may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.

WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage

WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)

1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position in
the vehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.

Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
SRT Engine Break-In Recommendations: The following
tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance • Avoid aggressive braking.
and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still • Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through 100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
the first oil change interval.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
It is recommended for the operator to observe the followthan halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
period:
• Avoid aggressive braking.
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
extended period of time.
observe local speed limits.
SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

SAFETY TIPS

• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually Transporting Passengers
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera- AREA.
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
(2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

WARNING! (Continued)

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
(Continued)

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, Air Bag Warning Light
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Vehicle
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for driving, have the system checked by an authorized
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be dealer.
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
Defroster
system.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopertorn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat able.
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Floor Mat Safety Information

WARNING! (Continued)

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.

(Continued)

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .108

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .117

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .117

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features
Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .116

▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .130

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .146

▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .133

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .139
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .152
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .159
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .162
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .163

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .156

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

▫ Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles . . . . . . . .158

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .184

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .171
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .172
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .185
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .188
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .179
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .199

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .213

▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .215
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .219
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .222
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .223
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .225

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .227

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .230 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .232

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
Automatic Dimming Mirror
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:

NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
• The vehicle brand.
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator operator terminates the connection.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
additional help is needed.
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
(Continued)

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent
wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for
the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.

(Continued)

9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Delayed accessories mode is active.
•
•
•
•
•
•

NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
The ignition is in the OFF position.
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
properly.
damaged during a crash.
General Information
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
nected during a vehicle crash.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
are unavailable or obstructed.
this device must accept any interference received, includEquipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• Wireless network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
forward, full rearward and normal.
lane next to your vehicle.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
(Continued)

The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
mirror adjusts.
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt MirOutside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
rors in Reverse position.
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
formation.
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of Power Mirrors
the doors.
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
door trim panel.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Power Mirror Control
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a Your Vehicle” for further information.
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is

Slide-On-Rod Feature

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are Entering From The Side
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
contamination so that the BSM system can function
side of the vehicle.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.

Side Monitoring

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Entering From The Rear

Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.

Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off

(Continued)

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Power Seat Switches
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
1 — Seat Control
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, 2 — Seatback Control
forward or rearward.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Power Lumbar Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
Heated
Seats
—
If Equipped
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar On some models, the front and rear seats may be
support.
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated Front Heated Seats
using the Uconnect® System.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.

once to turn the HI

• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.

a second time to turn

• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.

a third time to turn

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The Rear Heated Seats
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap- On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
proximately 45 minutes.
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
NOTE:
that allow the rear
are two heated seat switches
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within passengers to operate the seats independently.
two to five minutes.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
operate.
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
once to select HI-level
On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Push the heated seat button
heating.
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to select
LO-level heating.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand- • Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the heating elements OFF.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
two to five minutes.
HI and LO.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
operate.
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
NOTE:

control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

• Press the ventilated seat button

once to choose HI.

• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.

a second time to

• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.

a third time to

Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.

Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
Adjustment Button
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then 1 — Release Button
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
2 — Adjustment Button

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.

Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.

Adjustment Button

NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center
rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Seatback Loop

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.

Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable

pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Drivers Information Display (DID)
will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory Seat Switches

Programming The Memory Feature

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.

NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.

Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the Drivers Informust select the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal Settings
mation Display (DID).
Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect® system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding 4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
mitter within 10 seconds.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked from
ing:
your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before
continuing to Step 3.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
position 2.
in PARK, a message will display in the Drivers InformaA recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
tion Display (DID).
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, adjustable
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steerUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
memory position 1.
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
position 1.
vehicle.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
position 2.
Memory Position Recall

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) further information.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.

3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety catch lever to the left.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.

Safety Catch Lever Location

4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if equipped).

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off NOTE:
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
this feature.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruNOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
ment Panel” for further information.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
further information.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
when the headlight switch is turned off.
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
To Deactivate
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
operation of low beams).
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the turn off in the normal manner.
system.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable usHeadlight Time Delay
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an information.
unlit area.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps switch.
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
Multifunction Lever
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Turn Signals
steering column.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

NOTE:

High/Low Beam Switch

• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released.
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
Lane Change Assist
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond will shut off.
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped

Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Courtesy Lights

Ambient Light — If Equipped

The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor and center console area.

Courtesy Lights

Ambient Light

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls

Dimmer Controls

The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Instrument Panel Dimmer

Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Intermittent Wiper System

The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

NOTE: The heated washer nozzles only apply heat to the
nozzle outlets to prevent them from freezing and allow
the nozzles to dispense windshield washer fluid. Always
remove any buildup of snow or ice in front of the washer
nozzles as this will prevent the windshield washer fluid
from reaching the windshield.
Mist Feature

Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
This feature utilizes a heating element to thaw out any ice mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
buildup that could occur at the outlets or within the continue to operate until you release the multifunction
windshield washer nozzles. To activate, push the rear lever.
window defroster button. When the rear window de- NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
froster times out, the heating element will also shut off. If pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
required, to reactivate the heated nozzles push the rear windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
window defroster button as needed.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
OFF position when not using the system.
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for NOTE:
further information.
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windfeature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
shield.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inThe Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
formation.
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

— IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the lever on the steering column.
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.

WARNING!

Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up On models that are equipped with remote start, the
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
WARNING!
control button through the climate screen or the controls
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
screen.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhausturn the heating element ON.
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
Adjustable Pedals Switch
seat position. This feature allows the brake and acceleraPush
the
switch
forward to move the pedals forward
tor pedals to move toward or away from the driver to
(toward
the
front
of the vehicle).
provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
cushion side shield.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed

positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Activate

To Set A Desired Speed

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed

Metric Speed (km/h)

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed buttons. The two control modes function differently.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a Always confirm which mode is selected.
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the

brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.

(Continued)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL

When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
“ACC Ready.”
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)

If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
To Cancel
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
The following conditions cancel the system:
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
• The brake pedal is applied.
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Turn Off

NOTE:

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
memory if:
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
• The ignition is turned off.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
WARNING!
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.

The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

To Vary The Speed Setting

Metric Speed (km/h)

To Increase Speed

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in the DID.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reU.S. Speed (mph)
flected in the DID.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
NOTE:
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
of the vehicle.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
flected in the DID.
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
Metric Speed (km/h)
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vethis moment.
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
passing on the left hand side.
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interACC Operation At Stop
vention will be required at this moment.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
WARNING!
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
need for any driver action.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two these warnings can result in a collision and death or
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC serious personal injury.
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Overtake Aid

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

ACC SET

The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster.
information it displays depends on ACC system status. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
• System Cancel
the following displays in the DID:
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• ACC Proximity Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

• ACC Unavailable Warning

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • The DID will return to the last display selected after
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning

vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.

When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailtemporarily occur.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funcexamine the windshield and the camera located on the tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Narrow Vehicles

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed

SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set.
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control
is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
U.S. Speed (mph)
in the DID display.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
To Decrease Speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underin the DID display.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
U.S. Speed (mph)
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reTo Resume Speed
flected in the DID display.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
To Cancel
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed 20 mph (32 km/h).
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Turn Off

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
memory if:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
ON/OFF button is pushed.
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
• The ignition is turned off.
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
pushed.
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
FCW Message
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.

be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.

WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect® display.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
in front of you.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
avoid a possible collision.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
return to its full performance state. If the problem perdriver after ignition shut down.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Service FCW Warning
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
screens.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits LaneSense Operation
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
NOTE:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
below the Uconnect® display.
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the DID.
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
Left
Lane
Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
boundary.
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
3

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Changing LaneSense Status

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.

The LaneSense system settings can be configured • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
through the Uconnect® system screen.
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
forward collision warning, etc.)
1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
EQUIPPED
2. Push the “Settings” button.
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Syswarning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person- tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
alization settings.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
NOTE:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
ParkSense® Warning Display

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime

Arc — Left
Rear
Arc — Center Rear

Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None

79-59 in
(200150 cm)

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

Less than
12 in
(30 cm)

Slow
(for rear
center
only)

Fast
(for rear
center
only)

Fast

Continuous

None

Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
None

None

1st Flashing

None

6th Solid

5th Solid

4th Solid

3rd Flashing

2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing

1st Flashing

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Arc —
Right Rear
Radio
Volume
Reduced

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)

Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None

79-59 in
(200150 cm)
None

None

Yes

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

Less than
12 in
(30 cm)

None

1st Flashing

Yes

2nd Flashing
Yes

Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.

When the ParkSense® system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense®
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.

ParkSense® Switch

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS”
or If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
Panel” for further information.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damsystem has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
age the sensors.
Information Display (DID) will display the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:

Information Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
• ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio when
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operit is sounding an audio tone.
ating properly.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
affect the performance of ParkSense® or render the
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
system temporarily unavailable.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instruobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
ment cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off,
bumper.
it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the Driver
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID).

CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay the vehicle.
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.

Overhead Console

Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.

Front Map/Reading Lights

To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

Courtesy Lights

Sunglasses Bin Door

The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.

Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
open and close the door. The name and color of the
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
button may vary by manufacturer.
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
not release the button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, before 1995.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
erase the channels.

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.

ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Renot release the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
light in view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and observe the indicator light.
not release the button.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
Using HomeLink®
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programming, plug it back in at this time.
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaReprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light(Canadian/Gate Operator)
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, also be used at any time.
follow these steps:
Security
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
2. This device must accept any interference that may be visors on the overhead console.
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

WARNING! (Continued)

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)

accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
Sunshade Operation
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the window.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

Sunroof Maintenance

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
open.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
NOTE:
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
• The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to the battery and powered at all times.
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
NOTE:
placed to the Off position. Opening either front door
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
will cancel this feature.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanddischarge.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
knob and element must be used.
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt on the center stack of the instrument panel.
(10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be
used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
Ignition Off Operation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

Front Power Outlet

WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.

Center Console Power Outlet

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet/
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Center Console Power Outlet/
Media Hub

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Retractable Cover

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s
elbows.
3

Front Cupholders

Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide

Rear Seat Cupholders

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped

STORAGE

On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with Glove Compartment
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
of the instrument panel.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Glove Compartment
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
lever.
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
Two separate storage compartments are also located small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
underneath the center console armrest.
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
Console Features

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.

Center Console

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.

Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

WARNING!
Front Door Trim Storage

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
push the button a second time.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .250

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .250

▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .260
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ DID Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ ECO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .332 䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .335

▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .335

▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .345
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .361

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
4

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Paddle Shifters
— Uconnect® System
— SRT Controls
— Glove Compartment

7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Engine Start/Stop Button
10 — Trunk Release Button
11 — Dimmer Controls
12 — Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT

Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
redline = 6400 RPM.
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
2. High Beam Indicator
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacThis indicator will turn on when the high beam ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
high beam.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
3. Brake Warning Light
1. Tachometer

This light monitors various brake functions, The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition from the OFF position to the ON/
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
sary.
by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Area

the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
The DID features an interactive display. For further
information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).”

The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indiThis indicator will illuminate when the park
vidual trip mileage.
lights or headlights are turned on.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur- 7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
lights are on.
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
should be checked monthly when cold and
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
to continue to function properly.
Light — If Equipped

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes, the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any
time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track, or Full OFF.
10. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this 12. Turn Signal Indicators
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will come
on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN 13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
position, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
turned off previously.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds long as four seconds.
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
CAUTION!
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
inspected by an authorized dealer.
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
14. Fuel Gauge
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
15. Temperature Gauge
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range for a fully

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light

bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
ON/RUN position. A chime will sound if the
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continustart. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter- DID Menu Items consists of the following:
active display which is located in the instrument cluster. • Speedometer
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

• Vehicle Info
• Performance
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID) Display

• Speed Warning

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a • Diagnostics — If Equipped
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

The system allows the driver to select information by UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
wheel:
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.

LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the submenu items
of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
DID Controls

• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT
arrow buttons will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the screen.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous • Pushing the Left arrow button will exit each submenu
scrolling.
layer and return to the main menu.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perforscreen viewed within that main menu will be dis- mance Timers):
played.
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
OK Button:
button.
For Digital Speedometer:

Engine Oil Life Reset

• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h). Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
• Within each submenu layer, the UP/DOWN arrows chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to driving style.
the 1st page of the submenu).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The DID And Holding OK

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE will flash in the DID display for approximately 10
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
within 10 seconds.
upon your personal driving style.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the procedure(s):
OFF/LOCK position.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll Cruise Control
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access tales. These telltales include:
the ”Oil Life” screen.
• Cruise Ready
4. Push and hold the OK button until the “Oil Life”
screen displays.

This telltale will illuminate white to indicate
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is
activated.

5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “
Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select • Electronic Speed Control SET
reset of the Oil Life.
This telltale will illuminate green when the
6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elecsubmenu screen.
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
information.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped

• LaneSense Failure Telltale

This light warns the driver of a potential colliThis telltale will turn on to indicate that the
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
• Service AWD Indicator
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
properly and that service is required.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windDID Red Telltales
shield washer fluid is low.
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped

This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales.
These telltales include:

• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
Equipped
operating and needs service. Refer to “AdapIf the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
information.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle • Decklid Ajar
has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Power
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further
may be ajar.
information.
NOTE:

• Oil Pressure Warning Light
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
and during parking maneuvers.
A chime will sound for four minutes when this light
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for turns on.
service.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
• Door Ajar
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
more doors may be ajar.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
may require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on,
• Air Bag Warning Light
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
CAUTION!
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperarized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.

Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu
items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure Monitor

DID Selectable Menu Items

Coolant Temp
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID. Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer

Oil Pressure

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Oil Life
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and Battery Voltage
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
Intake Air Temp
digital speedometer.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Torque

WARNING! (Continued)

Engine Power
Air-Fuel Ratio — 6.2L Supercharged
Boost Pressure — 6.2L Supercharged
Intercooler Water Temp — 6.2L Supercharged

measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/
Sub-Menu selectable items and navigation.

Performance Features

WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
(Continued)

The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

• 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer

• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
button for two seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph 1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
two seconds.
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condiwithin 20 seconds.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

1/4 Mile (400 Meters)

• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the •
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters).
•
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi•
tions are met for the event to begin.

Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
The word “READY” will display when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run,
plete stop.
push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the
Braking Distance
current and last run values.

When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking Current G-Force
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
pushed.
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of
the forces.

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the
“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
0:00.00.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the • If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
values.
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
Lap Timer
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
Peak G-Force

always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).

• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away
from this page.

• Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.

Lap History

• When OK is pushed, the times are updated accord- When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
ingly.
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the
Timer Page.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on • Units will change with the global change in units.
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
Driver Assist — If Equipped
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
the Timer Page.
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
on.
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only. the following displays in the DID:
Top Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaplast reset:
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• Latching over ignition cycles.
Control Ready.”

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering • The DID will return to the last display selected after
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
instrument cluster.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys• Distance Setting Change
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
• System Cancel
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Driver Override
Fuel Economy
• System Off
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• ACC Proximity Warning
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value disACC SET

played and one without the Current Value displayed:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

–
–
–
–

Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements

• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the DID.

• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
Stored Messages
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
Trip Info
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left what the stored messages are.
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information Screen Setup
will display the following:
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Distance
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
• Average Fuel Economy

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp

• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Dis

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• None
4. Gear Display
• Single Di
• Full PRND (default)

arrow to select a desired speed, then push and release
OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist (MSA)
Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a
chime will sound with a pop up warning message when
the set speed is exceeded.
Diagnostics — If Equipped

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
5. Defaults (defaults: Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able
Center Menu Title)
to view engine and emission vehicle faults.
• Ok
• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
• Cancel
• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is
Speed Warning — If Equipped
requested during which the following message is
displayed:
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release • Driver must push the OK button again to see the next
OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or DOWN
Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
or down).
This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.
sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
from the beginning.
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
• When no codes are present or the last code is reached until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
= (P0000) and this message is displayed:
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
• “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
Your Instrument Panel” for further information on enThe Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on abling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle Indicator.
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4

CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® touchscreen.

Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings
Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect®
system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock,
Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings • Display Mode
may vary.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- display settings. To change Mode status, press and rescreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on
even though the headlights are on.
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the • Display Brightness With Headlights ON
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
available settings.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
Display
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
the following settings will be available:
touchscreen.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with • Set Theme — If Equipped
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
display screen. The theme will change the background
⬙parade⬙ positions.
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
screen.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lanNOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and appears next to the language, showing that setting has
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
⬙parade⬙ positions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285

• Touchscreen Beep

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption

After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.

Voice
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
“km/L.”
following settings will be available:
• Pressure
• Voice Response Length
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.

• Set Time Hours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the return to the previous menu.
following settings will be available:
• Set Time Minutes
• Sync Time With GPS

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.

This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Time Format

This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs • Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
to the previous menu.
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchbutton. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
screen.
Safety & Driving Assistance
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConAfter pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Vehicle”.
able:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking

lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
zone start point.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make Vehicle”.
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further The amount of directional torque the steering system can
information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
Your Vehicle.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• ParkSense®

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled • Rear ParkSense® Volume
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only” selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button
system function and operating information.
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
• Front ParkSense® Volume

setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse

When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
• Blind Spot Alert
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
back button on the faceplate.
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press • Headlight Illumination On Approach
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
following settings will be available.
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apis shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
Lights

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen • Flash Lights With Lock
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
on the faceplate.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
Doors & Locks
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchor without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
screen the following settings will be available:
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
• Auto Unlock On Exit
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To to return to the previous menu.
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” • Sound Horn With Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
to return to the previous menu.
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).

When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter • Passive Entry
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
Engine Off Options
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
• Headlight Off Delay
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the directly on the desired setting.
following settings will be available.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio

• Balance/Fade

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Equalizer

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the Phone/Bluetooth®
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
previous menu.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Phones
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Loudness — If Equipped

This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the toucharrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous screen, the following settings will be available:
menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

• Channel Skip

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
the screen or visit the provider online.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the and is available for U.S. residents only.
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
Restore Settings
touchscreen.
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
• Subscription Information
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free • Restore Settings
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
services, it will be necessary to access the information on Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
to access the Subscription Information screen.
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings System Information
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen After pressing the “System Information” button on the
to exit.
touchscreen the following information will be available:
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informaon the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able:
version.
• Clear Personal Data
SRT Performance Pages
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data Performance Pages is an application that provides a
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove display for performance indicators, as received from the
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “SRT &
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. Press Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT
Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive
previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

Modes. Press the desired button on the touchscreen to The Performance Pages include the following:
access that specific Performance Page.
• Home

WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.

• Timers
• Digital Gauge 1
• Digital Gauge 2
• G-Force
• Engine

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home

When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.

Performance Pages — Home

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:

Timers

• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages — Timers

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Save

• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save to the jump drive.

Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save
runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
Performance Pages — Save

NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)

• Brake Distance

Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
stop.
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)

NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• Brake Speed
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is depressed.
(200 meters).
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile MPH (48 km/h).
(400 meters).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter)

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Gauges 1

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Trans Oil Temp

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L)

Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L)

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Gauges 2

• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature.

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L)

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

When selected, this screen displays the following values: G-Force
• Boost Pressure
Shows the current value for boost pressure.
• Air Fuel Ratio
Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio.

• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
Charger SRT Performance Pages — G-Force

When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When G-Force is selected, the following features will be • Vehicle Speed
available:
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right value.
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking

• Steering Wheel Angle

Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
braking force of the vehicle.
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
Right
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
they are cleared by the driver.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

Engine

SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.2L)

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.4L)

• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.

SRT Drive Modes
Key FOB 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped

• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Gear
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
Shows the actual boost pressure.

Red Key FOB

If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged
engine, it will support an additional engine power level
configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine’s the SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by
output, and allows the driver to select from two power pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the
SRT Drive Modes menu.
levels within Drive Modes Set-Up.
Drive Modes
4

Black Key FOB

Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced
Drive Modes
engine output. This information is also available within Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
which allows for coordinating the operation of various

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving • Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “SRT & Apps”
behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled
menu.
through the Uconnect® radio and may be accessed by
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
performing any of the following:
Pages menu.
• Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel
NOTE: Not all options listed in this manual are available
switch bank.
on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available
Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Engine/
Transmission
6.2L
6.4L

Red Key/
700+ HP

Black Key/
500 HP

Transmission

Paddle
Shifters

Suspension

Steering

Traction

X
N/A

X
X

N/A
X

X
X

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s perforTrack Mode
mance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons
are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate the actual status of each system, along with a graphic
that displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The
color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow
“Street.” If the system status shown does not match the
current drive mode set up, a message will be displayed
indicating which values are not matching the current
mode and why.
NOTE: ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the
Drive Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off
Drive Modes (Track)
button on the instrument panel switch bank for five
seconds.
Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will
activate the configuration for typical track driving. The

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will
are all set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving.
Paddle Shifters are enabled.
The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension
systems are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in
Sport Mode
orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.

Drive Modes (Sport)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

The vehicle will start in Default Mode unless Valet mode
is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions
where the Traction and Transmission will be operating in
their Street settings, which cannot be changed while in
this mode. The Steering and Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,” “Sport,” or “Track” modes and
the Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in
this mode.

Default Mode

Drive Modes (Default)

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

configuration that is saved for quick selection of your
favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the Horsepower, Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and
Paddle Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration.

Custom Mode

The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing
the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two
times, or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom

Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.4L Example

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the Horsepower — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged
“Custom Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the Engine
selectable options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen the
individual current configuration will be displayed. Select
which mode suits your driving needs for a custom
driving experience.
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info”
button on the touchscreen then use the left / right arrows
to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems
giving you a description of their operation and current
configuration.

Horsepower — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only

• 700+
Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 700+ horsepower.

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED Transmission — If Equipped With 8 Speed
RKE Key Fob.
Transmission
• 500
Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 500 horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
BLACK RKE Key Fob.

Transmission

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

• Track

Paddle Shifters

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort
trade-off.
• Sport

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort
trade-off.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily
driving.

Paddle Shifters

• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel paddle shifters.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• OFF

• Track

Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify
steering wheel paddle shifters.
traction control to optimize track performance with the
least stability control.
Traction
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.

Traction

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

• Sport

Suspension

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a
firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort tradeoff.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for
typical daily driving.
Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine
• Track
Suspension

• Track

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the highest level.
• Sport

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest steering effort to the higher level.
amount of comfort trade-off.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Street

Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen
while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s
Press the “Street⬙ button on the touchscreen to adjust the
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
steering effort to the lowest level.
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Race Options
Launch Control and Shift Light features.
Launch Control

WARNING!

Race Options

Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

bank then selecting the“Race Options” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Press the
“Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM. Launch
Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the
Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch
bank (if activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch
Mode” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
Activate Launch Control

Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or
pressing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Shift Light

Launch RPM Set-Up

To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.
Shift Light
The launch RPM limit is between 1500 and 3500 RPM.
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Start- button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light
On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on
ing and Operating”.
the Driver Information Display (DID). Pressing the “Shift

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Light RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift
you to the Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.
light to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8. Pressing and
releasing the up/down arrow buttons on the touchscreen
above and below each listed gear, the RPM values will
change in increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding
the arrows will change the RPM values in increments of
500 RPM, ranging from 2000–6000 RPM (6.2L) and 2000–
6250 RPM (6.4L.) The Shift Light setup screen may only
be accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to
factory default” button on the touchscreen to change
back to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off”
button on the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
Shift Light RPM Set-Up

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.

Valet Mode

While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• Engine limited to the lowest power output state.
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal.
• Traction, Steering, and Suspension are set to their
STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the
SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock
keypad.
To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you • The ESC Off button is disabled.
would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you
will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is • The Launch Control button is disabled.
Valet Mode Activation

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

Valet Mode Deactivation

Valet Mode Deactivation PIN

To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN
that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can
be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the
faceplate, or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press
Here to Exit” button on the touchscreen.

The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state after a key cycle.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle
will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for approximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle
the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
ECO Mode

Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT
Drive Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration
performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or
vibration may be noticed while Eco is active. This is
normal and a result of the increased amount of operating
conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four
cylinder shutoff mode (6.4L Only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
• Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or “Eco” button is pressed.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

Eco Mode

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or an external USB device to
be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.

The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For
further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement
Manual.
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot

Located on the rear of the front center console are dual
USB “Charge Only” ports.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.

Rear USB Charging Ports

The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.

Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
AUX, etc.)
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
The following describes the left-hand control operation in turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
each mode.
Radio Operation

Regulatory And Safety Information

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next USA/CANADA
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
including interference that may cause undesired opfound in radio frequency safety standards and recomeration.
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
community.
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de liThe radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilemitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitlage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Rear Defrost Button

CAUTION! (Continued)

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
for cooler temperature settings.
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
as follows:
automatically exit Sync.
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
9. SYNC
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize control knob counterclockwise.
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature Button On The Touchscreen
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
10. Blower Control
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air area between the icons.
forced through the climate system. There are seven

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

11. Modes

• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conAir comes from the outlets in the instrument ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu- warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
amount of air is directed through the defrost
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
and side window demister outlets.
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
• Mix Mode
from these outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
time.
ON/OFF.
Climate Control Functions
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
temperature settings.
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
12. Climate Control OFF Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature con- NOTE:
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
needed.
warmer temperature settings.

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation Control
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
MAX A/C
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
mance.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
ON.
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink NOTE:
and then turn off.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
Automatic Operation
as possible.
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperaunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
this section of the manual.
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasTo provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
automatically maintain that comfort level.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation Override
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
system to function automatically.

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

Summer Operation

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.

Winter Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
selected in Manual operation.

Operating Tips

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.

Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Outside Air Intake
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air containing
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Mainperiods, as fogging may occur.
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.

Uconnect® 8.4AN

If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
instructions.
Get Started

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button

. After the beep, say:

• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say:

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be Late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel (If equipped).

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Press the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, press the VR button
the beep, say:

. After

• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, press the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.

Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.
NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States ***Extra charges apply.
and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
available; see coverage map for details.
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
9-1-1 Call
touchscreen.
Security Alarm Notification
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting

the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)

Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
is:
to process your message.
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
moparownerconnect.com.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
voice to send a personalized text message.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is TIP:
then connected to your mobile device.
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesilluminated to use the feature.
sage to John Smith.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the VR button
“Launch YELP.”

. After the beep, say:

2. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, press the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Yelp®
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

. After the beep, say one of the
Press the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXM Travel Link™

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

Additional Information

Uconnect® System Support:

© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.

• U.S. residents call
DriveUconnect.com

1-877-855-8400

visit

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .376

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .376

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 䡵 DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .373

▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .397

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .408

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED .402

▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .405

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .421

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .405

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .422

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .424 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .441
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .429 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .443
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

▫ Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .444
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .432

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . .451

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .452

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .459

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .454

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .457 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .459

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
(Continued)

a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission

CAUTION! (Continued)

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
(Continued)

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the 3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
the engine starting, push the button again.
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
message and the engine will remain running. Never
pedal.
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push (engine not running) position and the transmission is in
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
OFF position.

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

WARNING!

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

WARNING! (Continued)
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)

2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
the OFF position.
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
(DID).
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock SysThe brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
tem” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
driving.
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.

Automatic Transmission Shifter

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.

WARNING!

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauGear Ranges
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.

PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.

(Continued)

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

NEUTRAL (N)

CAUTION! (Continued)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

CAUTION!

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
(Continued)

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve Transmission Limp Home Mode
performance and extend transmission life by reducing Transmission function is monitored electronically for
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
below), transmission operation may be modified depend- Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
MANUAL (M)
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
position) enables full manual control of transmission inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to indicate what actions may be necessary.
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). TogIn the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
gling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select
following steps.
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine AUTOSTICK
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
operation.
and improve overall vehicle performance.
5. Restart the engine.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

This system can also provide you with more control Operation
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
mountain driving, and many other situations.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel) to
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, (or tap
the lever rearward (+) or tap the (+) shift paddle), to
command an upshift.
Paddle Shifters
1 — (–) Shift Paddle

2 — (+) Shift Paddle

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift • In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
paddles (+/-), while the shift lever is in DRIVE, will
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
automatic operation.
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will be
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
displayed in the instrument cluster, but the ⬙M⬙ will not
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
normal operation (if the shift lever remains in DRIVE)
or as described below. The transmission will not
after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
activity.
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles), unless an
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
display the current gear.
will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
fault or overheat condition is detected.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
vehicle is accelerated.
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking
snowy or icy conditions.
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the shift
lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode
feature. This feature gives the driver control over the
systems in the vehicle which affect its performance,
enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these
modes.

Drive Modes

• TRACK Mode — TRACK Mode is a pre-defined
configuration optimized for typical track driving. The
ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

• SPORT Mode — SPORT Mode is a pre-defined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving.
The ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.
• CUSTOM — CUSTOM Mode allows the driver to
create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The system will
return to Default mode when the ignition switch is
cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is
selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter setCustom Mode Set-Up
tings may be configured through the custom mode
Listed below is a description of each of these settings:
set-up in any combination.
Transmission (Trans)
• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the
highest comfort trade-off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a Suspension (Susp)
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension
stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort
for typical daily driving.
• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with
Paddles — If Equipped
moderate comfort trade-off.
• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. • Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness
and ride comfort for typical daily driving.
• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shiftSteering — 6.4L Engine Only
ers.
• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering
feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering
• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track
effort.
performance with the least stability control.
• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring
• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability
greater steering effort.
control.
• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and
• Street — provides full traction control and full stability
steering effort.
control.
Traction

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
• 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+
horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED RKE
Key Fob “700+ HP”.

(active dampening system) stiffness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT or TRACK settings
within this mode. Steering wheel mounted paddle
shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode
as well.

NOTE: The vehicle will restart with DEFAULT active if
• 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500 DEFAULT was active when the vehicle was last shut
horsepower.
down.
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
• VALET — To enter Valet Mode the operator must
BLACK RKE Key Fob “500 HP”.
select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a
four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predeter• DEFAULT — DEFAULT Mode will be activated automined, so the operator is free to select any four digit
matically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet
numeric combination that will be easy to remember.
mode is active. This mode is for typical driving conWhile in Valet Mode the following vehicle configuraditions where the ABS and Transmission will be opertions are set and locked to prevent unauthorized
ating in their STREET settings, which cannot be
modification:
changed while in this mode. The Steering (electric
power steering — if equipped) assist and Suspension • Engine limited to a lowest power output state.

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

• Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts • The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET
earlier than normal.
was active when the vehicle was last shut down.
• Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to • Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies
STREET settings.
the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with accel• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.
eration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise
• The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pressing the
and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active,
SRT button will display the unlock keypad.
this is normal and will not damage the vehicle.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.

NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.

• The Launch Control button is disabled.

Launch Mode — If Equipped

NOTE:

This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The

• To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same
four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The
unlock keypad can be accessed by either pressing the
SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the
Uconnect® touchscreen.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
recommended.
control resulting in an aborted launch.
Launch Control is available when the following proceNOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500 dure is followed:
miles of engine break-in.
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch
Preconditions:
bank.
• Launch control should not be used on public roads. NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
Always check track conditions and the surrounding pushing the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen are
area.
two other options to access launch control features.
Please refer to “Uconnect® Settings” within your Own• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
er’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
of the vehicle’s life.
2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touch• Launch Control should only be used when the engine
screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
and transmission are at operating temperature.
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

3. Push the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
touchscreen.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
return to its current ESC mode.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch control will abort before launch completion,
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to
“Drive”.
ESC Full ON under any the following conditions:
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator • The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
system continues in ESC Full ON.
hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
Set-up” screen.
moving in a straight line. ESC system continues in ESC
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
Full ON.
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the system
above conditions have not been met.
to another mode. One push puts the ESC system into
8. When conditions 5 through 8 have been met, the
ESC Full ON.
Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch
Ready Release Brake”.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will • Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at
return to its current ESC mode.
the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.

• Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish
prior to track outing at full pace.

• At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
Brembo High Performance brake system.
track use is not covered by warranty.
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
braking.
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle oper• If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille,
ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
it is recommended to remove it for track use during
event.
Guidelines For Track Use

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi Hot Tire
critical powertrain and cooling system components.
Pressure at the conclusion of each track session. Starting
at 32psi Front & 30psi Rear Cold and adjusting based on
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
ambient & track conditions is recommended. Tire presendurance, however, it is recommended that suspensure can be monitored via the Driver Information Display
sion system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
(DID) and can assist with adjustments.
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
every track event.
Track burnishing your brakes:
• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped, To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
driveline and brake system. This may affect noise pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
(NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle. installed components or when new brake friction comNew components may need to be installed to return ponents are installed:
the system to the original NVH performance.
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
• Tire pressure:
• 40psi hot, recommend 32psi front, 30psi rear cold

75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max
without ABS intervention.
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies. 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
another cool down lap.
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
step 2-4.
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them 7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should
their life negatively in future track use.
be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city
miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
the rotor surface prior to track use.
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out. 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, makmore than half the thickness of the pad material
ing it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
pulsation in further track use.

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Traction

Acceleration

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.

WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
(Continued)

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected NOTE:
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to the “Drive • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
Modes” in this section for further information.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
WARNING!
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE
The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and
will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.

Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
The foot operated parking brake is located below the switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the the instrument cluster will illuminate.
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever/gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.

All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, reduces stop distance, and enhances vehicle
control during stop.

When the vehicle is driven over 6 mph (10 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
related motor noises. These noises are the system perYour vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys- working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist vehicle is started and accelerated past 6 mph (10 km/h).
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

WARNING! (Continued)
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
Warning Light” is not on.
accurate signals for the computer.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Sport Mode (Partial Off)”
repaired as soon as possible.
or ⬙Track Mode (Full Off)⬙ mode. Refer to “Electronic
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for more informaBrake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
tion.
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Brake Assist System (BAS)
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
soon as possible.
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
can help reduce braking distances.
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
Traction Control System (TCS)

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
WARNING!
maintain the desired path.
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be the condition of oversteer or understeer.
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.

ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has four available operating modes:
Street Mode
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is intended for times when a more spirited
driving experience is desired. It is also can be useful
when wheel-slip may be desired such as driving out of
deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS
portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what
ESC normally allows.

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

Track Mode
Track Mode is intended to be used when driving on a
track. This raises the threshold for ESC activation further
than Sport and also has track tuned TCS to improve
vehicle performance while on a road course type track.
NOTE:
• To enter Sport ESC mode momentarily push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch, or use the buttons on the Drive modes
pages in the radio. Pushing the ⬙ESC off⬙ switch again
with cycle through to Track ESC mode. Pushing the
⬙ESC off⬙ button a third time will bring ESC back to
Street Mode.

Once the situation requiring “Sport Mode” is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pushing
the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!
When in “Sport/Track” mode, the TCS portion of
ESC, except for the limited wheel spin feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When
in “Sport/Track” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

Full Off
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Sport only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
Mode” by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” switch. this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate, and the “ESC off” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON
again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC off⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched SPORT, the BLD
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

to the “Sport Mode” by momentarily pushing the “ESC • Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
Off” switch.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
the intended direction of travel.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
activate:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)

• Vehicle must be stopped.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing With HSA

HSA Off

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
when pulling a trailer.
the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further information.
WARNING!
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

Rain Brake Support

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loSupport is active, there is no notification to the driver and cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
no driver interaction is required.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

Synchronizing ESC

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is
started while in 4L Range.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.

If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

EXAMPLE:
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy

• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
ride.
NOTE:
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door.
vehicle to drift left or right.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

At least once a month:

1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

Tire Repair

Tire Types

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
Snow Tires
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tire inflation pressures.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Spinning

Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susthis manual for more information relating to the Load
pension dimensions and performance characterisIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
Replacement Tires

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local authorized dealership or tire
dealer for these size tires.

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving
about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
(Continued)

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tire Rotation

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
different loads and perform different steering, driving, with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at the following diagram.
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(Continued)

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
Premium System
or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
NOTE:

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
• TPM Telltale Light

TPMS Display

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the DID will display a “LOW TIRE”

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color. An ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also
be displayed in the DID display.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the DID will return the pressure values shown to their
original color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.

Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains Vehicles With Compact Spare
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
the compact spare tire.
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
display the low pressure values in a different color and
the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.

The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.

General Information

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.

(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of 91
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. PropWhile operating on gasoline with the required octane erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide imnumber, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard system components.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
genates such as ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Fuel System Cautions
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
CAUTION!
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline performance:
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
formance and damage the emissions control systherefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
tem.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and California reformulated gasoline.
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Materials Added To Fuel
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
(Continued)
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT In Gasoline

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
5

ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

2. Open the fuel filler door.

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door

NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.

6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

WARNING!

Fuel Funnel

CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).

Release Cable

VEHICLE LOADING
Access Cover

3. Pull the release cable.

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

• Month and year of manufacture

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
(Continued)

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
it is not over the GVWR.
the brakes operate.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

NOTE:

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)

• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
GAWRs.
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
tire pressure.
OFF the ground.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .464

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .472

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .468 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .469

464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.

466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m)

M14 x 1.50

Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.

Wheel Mounting Surface

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).

Torque Patterns

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
against the wheel.

468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Storage

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.

Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Using The Power Button

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Using The Deflation Button
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
when selecting this mode.
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
use. Always replace these components immediately at
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
your original equipment vehicle dealer.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact

(Continued)

WARNING!

472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
nails) from the tire.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Service Kit.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:

474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the DeflaHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.

CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle (D) Drive Vehicle:
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive VeImmediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
hicle.”
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
Volt outlet.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
the vehicle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
of it accordingly.
service center.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
housing.
panel after the tire has been repaired.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
ment”.
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.

478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Preparations For Jump-Start
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
precautions.
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479

WARNING!

Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481

WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
battery.
with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the

least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483

NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION

WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
(Continued)

484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin.

Console Storage Bin

3. Remove plastic cover under the bin by using the slot
provided to access the Manual Park Release lever.
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485

5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.

The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.

Locking Tab

Tether Strap

6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged To Reset The Manual Park Release:
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.

486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
down, to its original position, until the locking tab This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
snaps into place to secure the lever.
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow

Front

Flatbed

Rear
ALL

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if
used, same limitations as above)
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI) .492
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .493
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .529
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .534
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .546
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED

1
2
3
4
5
6

—
—
—
—
—
—

Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Intercooler Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover

7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Steering Reservoir
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
12— Washer Fluid Reservoir

492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir

6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
7— Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

CAUTION! (Continued)

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497

Change Engine Oil

Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intercheck the engine oil level is about five minutes after a vals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
fully warmed engine is shut off.
whichever occurs first.
Checking Oil Level

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (.95
liters) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR® oil meeting
the FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.

498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L
Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle
serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only
perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a
unique engine oil system. The system contains a drain in
the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necessary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil
pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the
Materials Added To Engine Oil
engine oil change procedure. Failure to drain the engine
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to oil system.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
NOTE: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, presperformance may be impaired by supplemental addisure loss or oil foaming can result.
tives.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499

To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely
lifted and supported to remove the front underbody
shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to
the Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly
pan) removal and installation procedures.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.

500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Filter Selection

WARNING! (Continued)

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
maintenance intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
7
Battery Location

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)

502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped

1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
Access Door
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505

7
Filter Access Cover

3. Remove the used filter.

A/C Air Filter

5. Close the filter access cover.

4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).

506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication

Windshield Wiper Blades

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507

The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
WARNING!
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Commercially available windshield washer solvents
residual water.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
Adding Washer Fluid

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

(Continued)
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509

CAUTION! (Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic conwhen the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is immotion.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
against you.
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated.
Cooling System

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

NOTE: If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine
the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system please
contact your local authorized dealer.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead Selection Of Coolant
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
needed to be added to the system please contact your “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
(Continued)

512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainMS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
the vehicle is operated.
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma- NOTE:
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
needed to be added to the system please contact your
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentralocal authorized dealer.
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
(−37° C) are anticipated.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionHOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
possible.
engine cooling system.

514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System Pressure Caps

WARNING! (Continued)

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

NOTE: Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
these caps are not interchangeable.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515

Coolant Level

Points To Remember

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezshould be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
ing.

516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. ReCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Mainif the brake system warning light indicates system fail- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
ure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)

518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check

Special Additives

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
check your transmission fluid level using special service
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
adversely affect seals.

520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- Rear Axle
sion damage.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
CAUTION!
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
life of the vehicle.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
Change Axle Fluid
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
disassembled for any reason.
maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

What Causes Corrosion?

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
packaged and sealed.
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
and tarnishing.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or

CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels

CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped

Interior Care

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.

526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.

CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
directly on the mirror.
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are cloth.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
buckles do not work properly.
Glass Surfaces

528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.

FUSES

WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529

WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.

7
Front Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)

530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)

Cavity
1
2
3

Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red

Mini-Fuse
–
–
–

4
5
6

30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink

–
–
–

Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped
Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan
(6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531

Cavity
7
8
9
10

Cartridge Fuse
–
20 Amp Blue
–
–

Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19

–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–

30 Amp Pink

–

Description
Fuse – Spare
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood
Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped
Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan
(6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor

532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
21

Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink

Mini-Fuse
–

–

23
24
28
29

40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–

–
–
–
15 Amp Blue

30
31
32
33
34
35

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow

Description
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped /
Police Feed
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
/ Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 1 – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control
Module (LA/LD Police)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533

Cavity
36
37

Cartridge Fuse
–
–

Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

38
39
48

–
–
–

10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

49
50
51
52
53

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–

Description
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If
Equipped
Airbag Module
Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX)
/ Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare

534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.

Rear Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535

Cavity
2
3
4
5

Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
—
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink

Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—

6
7
8
9
10

40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink

—
—
—
—
—

30 Amp Pink

—

Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof / Dome Lamp –
Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control
Module
Passenger Door Control
Module

536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
12

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow

15
16
17
18

40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
—
30 Amp Pink

—
—
—
—

19
20
21

—
—
30 Amp Pink (6.2L Supercharged)
25 Amp Clear (LD STD)
—

—
—
—

20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red – LA

Description
Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface –
Police
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
Fuel Pump (LD STD)
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Integrated Center Stack –
LA

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537

Cavity
23

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red

—

15 Amp Blue

25
26

—
—

10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue – LD/LX
25 Amp Clear – LA
30 Amp Green – LA 6.2L
Supercharged

27
31
32
33

—
—
—
—

25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue

Description
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Integrated Center Stack –
LD/LX
Tire Pressure Monitor
Transmission / Electronic
Shift Module (LD/LX)
Fuel Pump (LA)
Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF hub
Module/Steering Column
Lock-LX If Equipped

538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
34

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red

35
36

—
—

5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue

37
38

—
—

20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue – LD/LX
20 Amp Yellow – LA

40
41
42

—
—
30 Amp Pink

—
—
—

Description
Steering Column
Module/Clock/Spare –
Police
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve
– If Equipped
Radio
Console Power Outlet/
Console Media Hub (LD/
LX)
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
(LA)
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Defrost

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539

Cavity
43

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow

—

10 Amp Red

—

15 Amp Blue

46
47

—
—

—
10 Amp Red

48
49
50

—
—
—

20 Amp Yellow
—
—

Description
Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel Module
Park Assist / Blind Spot
/ Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LDLX)/
Humidity Sensor
Fuse — Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting
/ Auto High BEAM /
Day Time Running
Lamps- If Equipped
Active Suspension – SRT
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare

540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
51

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow

—

10 Amp Red

—

10 Amp Red

54
55
56
57
58
59
60

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

10 Amp Red
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan

Description
Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
Airbag Module (LA)
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Airbag Module (LD/LX)
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Heated Washer Nozzles
(LD)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541

Cavity
61

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow

62
63
64
65
66
67

—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
—
10 Amp Red

—

10 Amp Red

69
70

—
—

Description
Cigar Lighter (LA) – If
Equipped
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Windows (LD/LX)
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Rain and Light Sensor/
Sunroof
Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear
Sunshade (LD/LX)
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare

542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE STORAGE

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the and should not be used for replacement.
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Interior Bulbs
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamps
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped

Bulb Number
W5W
562
578
A6220
194

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543

Bulb Number
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen Bi
Function Projector)
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (Premium HID Bi Function Projector)
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker
Rear Tail Lamp

Bulb Number
HIR2

D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED
LED
LED
LED

(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced

at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized

Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)

544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
License
BULB REPLACEMENT

LED
LED
LED
LED

Bulb Number
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized
(Serviced at Authorized

Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)

Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 1. Open the hood.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
accelerate the clearing process.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp housing by turning it counterclockwise, turn the bulb
counterclockwise and remove.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
install the replacement bulb.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headan authorized dealer for service.
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
5. Reinstall the dust cap.

WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.

546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp

Backup Lamps
The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Applique must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The Side Markers use LED sources that are not serviceThe CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
License Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be rereplaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
Intercooler (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
18.5 Gallons

Metric
70 Liters

6 Quarts
7 Quarts

5.68 Liters
6.6 Liters

15.2 Quarts

14.4 Liters
7

5 Quarts

4.7 Liters

15.2 Quarts

14.4 Liters

548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane or higher.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder

Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir — If Equipped

Rear Axle

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 brake fluid. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic System
Power Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-10838.
We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554

552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
A “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
vehicle off-road/track usage for an extended period of
oil change is necessary.
time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 553

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
master cylinder, and power steering (6.2L Only), and
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informaadd as needed.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
Panel” for further information.
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Change the engine oil filter.
hicle” for further information.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.

CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.

554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

48,000

54,000

60,000

66,000

72,000

78,000

84,000

90,000

96,000

Or Kilometers:

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

160,000

170,000

180,000

190,000

200,000

210,000

220,000

230,000

240,000

250,000

150,000

42,000

70,000

144,000

36,000

60,000

138,000

30,000

50,000

132,000

24,000

40,000

126,000

18,000

30,000

120,000

12,000

Or Months:

20,000

114,000

6,000

108,000

Miles:

10,000

102,000

Maintenance Chart

Change the
engine oil
and engine
oil filter.

Rotate the
tires, rotate
at the first
sign of irregular
wear, even
if it occurs
before
scheduled
maintenance.

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

160,000

If using
your vehicle
for any of
the following: dusty
or off-road
conditions.
Inspect the
engine air
cleaner filter; replace
if necessary.

Inspect the
brake linings; replace if
necessary.

150,000

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

250,000

96,000

144,000

90,000

240,000

84,000

138,000

78,000

230,000

72,000

132,000

66,000

220,000

60,000

126,000

54,000

210,000

48,000

120,000

42,000

200,000

36,000

114,000

30,000

190,000

24,000

108,000

18,000

180,000

12,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555

12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000

6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96

Or Kilometers:

Adjust the
parking
brake on
vehicles
equipped
with four
wheel disc
brakes.
X
X
X

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000

Inspect the
CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Inspect the
exhaust
system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

250,000

240,000

230,000

220,000

210,000

200,000

190,000

180,000

150,000

144,000

138,000

132,000

126,000

120,000

114,000

108,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000

6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96

Or Kilometers:

Change the
rear axle
fluid if using
your vehicle
for any of
the following: police,
taxi, fleet or
frequent
trailer towing.

Inspect the
rear axle
fluid.
X

X
X
X
X
X

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000

X
X

250,000

240,000

230,000

220,000

210,000

200,000

190,000

180,000

150,000

144,000

138,000

132,000

126,000

120,000

114,000

108,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000

6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96

Or Kilometers:

Inspect
front suspension, tie
rod ends,
and boot
seals, for
cracks or
leaks and
all parts for
damage,
wear, improper
looseness
or end play;
replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000

X
X
X
X

250,000

240,000

230,000

220,000

210,000

200,000

190,000

180,000

150,000

144,000

138,000

132,000

126,000

120,000

114,000

108,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000

6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96

Or Kilometers:

Replace the
engine air
cleaner
filter.

Replace the
air conditioning filter.

Replace the
spark plugs
– 6.2L Supercharged
Engine **
X

X
X
X

Inspect and
replace the
PCV Valve
if necessary

X
X
X
X

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000

X
X

250,000

240,000

230,000

220,000

210,000

200,000

190,000

180,000

150,000

144,000

138,000

132,000

126,000

120,000

114,000

108,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 559

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000

6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96

Or Kilometers:

Replace the
spark plugs
– 6.4L Engine **

Flush and
replace the
engine
coolant/
intercooler
at 120
months if
not done at
150,000
miles
(240,000
km).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000

250,000

240,000

230,000

220,000

210,000

200,000

190,000

180,000

150,000

144,000

138,000

132,000

126,000

120,000

114,000

108,000

102,000

6,000

Or Months:

170,000

Miles:

10,000

560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .565

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .566

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. .569

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .566

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .570

564 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 565

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

566 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 567

Mexico, D. F.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents,
call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 569

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR® PARTS

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/

570 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 571

Call toll free at:

Treadwear

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.

572 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX 573

INDEX

574 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 404
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .169
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 71
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Air bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 71, 98, 250
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .500
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 504
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .346, 348
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . .502, 503, 504
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 502
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

INDEX 575

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 547
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Anti-Lock Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 405
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .337, 338, 345
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376, 520
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520, 550
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 519
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .382
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

576 INDEX

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404, 516
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517, 550
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 404
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 542
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 454
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .493
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .87
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .86

INDEX 577

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .80
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .76
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .333
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .514
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 515
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .511, 547, 548
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 528
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

578 INDEX

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .32
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 269
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 269
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .529
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .165, 169
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

INDEX 579

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .493
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 548
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 454
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 547, 548
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 547
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 454
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 507
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

580 INDEX

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 504
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 548
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 150, 250
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .548
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 250

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 548
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .222, 228
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

INDEX 581

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.250
.250
.250
.250
.250
.378
.527
.459
.459
.459

Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .151
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 159
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .151
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

582 INDEX

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ignition
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 250
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 370
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 295
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 295
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

INDEX 583

Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)

.
.
.
.

.12
.17
.12
.16

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 542
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 145
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 71, 98, 250
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 404
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 250
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 545
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 159
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 250
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 250
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

584 INDEX

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .250
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .155
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 219
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .250
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .250, 444
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 150, 250
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .250
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 460
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552, 554
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .250, 493
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

INDEX 585

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 548
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 547
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 547
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
MOPAR® Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495, 569 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 548 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 570
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 497, 548
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521

586 INDEX

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 302
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .425
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .234
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.432
.514
.335
.334
.332
.159
.520
.216
.239
.206
.137
.244

INDEX 587

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503, 504
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .334
Remote Starting
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .297
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

588 INDEX

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 47, 50
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Seat Belt
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 98
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .53

INDEX 589

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .250
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 150, 250
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 437
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 169
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 369
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

590 INDEX

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .424, 425
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 429, 571
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 426
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .338, 345

Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .334
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 542
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .58
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

INDEX 591

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 429
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .461
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 376, 518

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 550
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 250
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .333
. . . . . . . . . . .297
. . . . . . . . . . .332
. . . . . .22, 23, 297

592 INDEX

Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 32
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .34, 295
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 295
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .333
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 458, 460
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 542
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .250
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 507
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 233
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

INDEX 593

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 157
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.

2015 Charger SRT 392

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL

FCA US LLC
15D482-126-AE

Fifth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Charger SRT 392

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Modify Date                     : 2016:05:13 10:09:06-04:00
Create Date                     : 2016:05:13 08:43:56-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2016:05:13 10:09:06-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Acrobat Pro 10.1.16
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2015 dodge Charger SRT 392 Owner's Manual
Description                     : 15D482-126-AE
Creator                         : 5th Ediition
Subject                         : 2539490 (Authoring checked in a new file for brand site and TechConnect - Wheel & Tire update.)
Document ID                     : uuid:995c8c5f-7ee3-472c-a9b2-abd9bf687806
Instance ID                     : uuid:255e94f9-2786-43a7-821b-efd53e4006da
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro 10.1.16
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 597
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : 5th Ediition
Keywords                        : 2539490, (Authoring, checked, in, a, new, file, for, brand, site, and, TechConnect, -, Wheel, &, Tire, update.)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2015 Dodge Charger SRT 392 Owner's Manual OM 5th?myyear=21&myvehicle=3&o Button.x=24&o Button

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation